hit counter code
LG F2400 User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. LG Manuals
  4. Cell Phone
  5. F2400
  6. User manual
LG F2400 User Manual

LG F2400 User Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for F2400:
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Service Manual, User Manual
Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone
depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.

Advertisement

Chapters

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for LG F2400

Summary of Contents for LG F2400

  • Page 1 Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
  • Page 2 ‫ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ - ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬F2400...
  • Page 3 34 ................‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ 8 ..................‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ 34 ..................‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ 9 ..........‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ 34 ................‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ 12 ............... ‫ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬F2400 35 ................‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ 12 ................‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ 15 ............... ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ 36 ................ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬...

  • Page 4: Table Of Contents

    ‫ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬F2400 45 ................‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ 39 ................‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 45 ................‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ 39 ................. ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ 45 ................‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ 39 ................. ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ 45 ................... ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ 40 ............... ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ 45 ................‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ 40 ................. ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ 40 ................‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬...
  • Page 5 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ 58 ................ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ 52 ................‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ 58 ................‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ 53 ................‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ 58 ................‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ 53 ..............‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ 58 ................‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ 53 ................ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ 58 ................‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ 54 ................‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ 58 ................
  • Page 6 ‫ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬F2400 69 ................‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ 62 ..................‫ﺁﻟﻲ‬ 70 ................‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ 63 ..................‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ 70 ................... ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ 63 ................... ‫ﻣﻔﻀﻞ‬ 70 ................‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ 63 ..............‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ 63 ..............GPRS ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 71 ................‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ 72 ................‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬...
  • Page 7 ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬F2400 ‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬...
  • Page 8 ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ (SAR) ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ ‫ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬F2400 ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ: ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ‬...
  • Page 9 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ • .‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ .(‫)ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ)ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ • .‫ﻻ...
  • Page 10 .‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻌﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬LG ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬ .‫ ﻟﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬LG .‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﺗﺸﻮﺵ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ‬...
  • Page 11 ‫ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬F2400 ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫1. ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫• ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫2. ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫3. ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫1. ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬...
  • Page 12 ‫ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬F2400 ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺔﻳﺭﺎﻄﺒﻟﺍ ءﺎﻄﻏ‬ ‫ﻡﺍﺰﺤﻟ ﺕﺎﺤﺘﻓ‬ ‫ﻞﻤﺤﻟﺍ‬ .‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻳﻀ ً ﺎ‬...
  • Page 13 ‫ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬F2400 ‫1. ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫2, 01. ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ/ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ: ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ . ً ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺓ‬ ‫1. ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬...
  • Page 14 ‫ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬F2400 ‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀ ً ﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ .‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺷﺮﺣ ً ﺎ ﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫31. ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ: ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬...
  • Page 15 ‫ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬F2400 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ .‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ .‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻰ‬ .‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬ .‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ .‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ .WAP ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ‬...
  • Page 16 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫2. ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬SIM ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ .‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ...
  • Page 17 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫4. ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .SIM ‫3. ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ؛ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬SIM ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬SIM ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ...
  • Page 18 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ، ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ .‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﻰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻳ ًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫•...
  • Page 19 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫1. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ، ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ، ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ “ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ” ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫2. ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ. ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ...
  • Page 20 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ (‫ )ﻣﻦ 4 ﺇﻟﻰ 8 ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬PUK2 ‫ﺭﻣﺰ‬ (‫ )ﻣﻦ 4 ﺇﻟﻰ 8 ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬PIN ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫، ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬SIM ‫، ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬PUK2 ‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ ﻣﻦ‬SIM ‫ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻚ‬PIN ‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻌﻪ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬PUK2 ‫...
  • Page 21 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫1. ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ. ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ”+“ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ‬ .‫1. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ .‫2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫2.
  • Page 22 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ◄ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫2. ﻭﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ، ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫( . ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬ ) ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ،...
  • Page 23 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ T9 ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫1. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ، ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ. ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ...
  • Page 24 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫3. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫- ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ. ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫، ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫- ﺇﺫﺍ...
  • Page 25 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ (‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ 321 )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ◄ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )ﺭﻗﻢ‬ .(‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ...
  • Page 26 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫. ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ.
  • Page 27 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ. ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ، ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ...
  • Page 28 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ/ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ،...

  • Page 29: ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ

    ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ( 34 ‫1. ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ( 39 ‫3. ﻣﺮﺡ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫1 ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫1 ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫2 ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫2 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫3 ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫3 ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫4 ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫4 ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫5 ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫5 ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫6 ﺣﺎﻟﺔ...

  • Page 30: ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ

    ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ( 58 ‫7. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ( 46 ‫5. ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫1 ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫1 ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫2 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫2 ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫3 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫3 ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫4 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫4 ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫5 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫5 ﺳﻤﺎﻉ...
  • Page 31 ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ( 69 ‫9. ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ( 64 ‫8. ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫1 ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫1 ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫2 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ SIM ‫2 ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫3 ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬...
  • Page 32 ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ً ﺎ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺗﻚ. ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫( . ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ )‫( ﻭ‬...
  • Page 33 ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ 1 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ: ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ◄ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ. ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ .‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ: ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ◄ ”‫ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ً ﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ: “ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ” ﻭ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ” ﻭ”ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ...
  • Page 34 ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ 3-×-1 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﻪ‬ ”‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ “ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ” ﻭ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ .”‫ﻭ”ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫1. ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ” ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ .”‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ...
  • Page 35 ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ 2 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ 2-2 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ 01 ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ .‫( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ...
  • Page 36 ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ 2-5-2 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ 4-2 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ”‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ “ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳ ُﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ. ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ”.
  • Page 37 ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ GPRS ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ 6-2 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ .GPRS 1-6-2 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ .‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‬ 2-6-2 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ...

  • Page 38: ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ

    ‫ﻣﺮﺡ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ 3 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ 1-3 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 2-3 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ +,-,×,% ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜ ﻴ ًﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ. ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ .‫1.

  • Page 39: ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ

    ‫ﻣﺮﺡ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ 1-5-3 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫1. ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬ ‫4. ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ...

  • Page 40: ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬ 4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ◄ 1-4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ‬SIM ‫ﻧﺴﺦ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ◄...

  • Page 41: ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[، ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫. ﺏ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬b 4-1-4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ .[‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫. ﺝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬c ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ، ﻣﻦ‬ ‫. ﺩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬d .‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫.

  • Page 42: ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬SIM ‫- ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫2. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬SIM ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺏ‬ ◄ ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬SIM ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ: ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬SIM ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ...

  • Page 43: ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬ 8-1-4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ 2-4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ◄ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ. ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﻣﻮﺯ...

  • Page 44: ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬ 5-2-4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ 1-2-4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 02 ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ 3-4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ :‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[. ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬...
  • Page 45 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ 5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫2. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ (‫ )ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬Messages ‫( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ) ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫[ )ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬Options] .‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ :‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ 1-5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ: ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ◄...
  • Page 46 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ً ﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬T9 ‫: ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬T9 ‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ‬ ◄ 2-1-5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫(. ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬T9 ‫” )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬T9 off“ ‫ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬T9 ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ‬ T9 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ...
  • Page 47 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ: ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ◄ .‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ: ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ◄ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ﻭﻟﻦ‬ .‫ﺣﻔﻆ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻘﺎﻟﺐ‬ ◄...
  • Page 48 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .SIM ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬SIM ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ‬SIM ‫ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ .[‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ...
  • Page 49 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ﻭﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ .‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ SIM ‫ﺇﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫ﻋﺮﺽ: ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ‬ ◄ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ: ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ◄ .‫ﺣﺬﻑ: ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ◄...
  • Page 50 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺪﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ. ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ 1-7-5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ، ﻟﺬﺍ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬ • .‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ‬ •...

  • Page 51: ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ

    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ◄ 3-7-5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ. ﺃﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ 2-7-5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ: ﻋﺮﺽ...

  • Page 52: ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ

    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫: ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ، ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬SMS ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ◄ 3-8-5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ .‫ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬SMS ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء‬ 2-8-5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬...

  • Page 53: ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ

    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫-ﻻ: ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ◄ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬ 5-8-5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ .‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ‬...

  • Page 54: ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ

    ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ 6 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ: ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ◄ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ3 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ٍ ﻭ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ٍ (. ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ...

  • Page 55: ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﻤﺎﻁ

    ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ 3-6 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫، ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬LCD ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ 9 ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ .‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ‬ ‫. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ...

  • Page 56: ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ

    ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﺣﺬﻑ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ◄ ‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ◄ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ◄ .‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ 9 ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ◄...

  • Page 57: ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ

    ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 7 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‬ 2-2-7 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ .‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﻮﻡ / ﺷﻬﺮ / ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺷﻬﺮ‬ .‫/ ﻳﻮﻡ / ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻨﺔ / ﺷﻬﺮ / ﻳﻮﻡ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ...
  • Page 58 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ 4-7 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ 1-4-7 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ...
  • Page 59 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ 2-4-7 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء: ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ◄ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ◄...
  • Page 60 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ‬PIN ‫3. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ، ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ .‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ: ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ◄ .‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ 5-4-7 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ،‫ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 3 ﻣﺮﺍﺕ، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬PIN ‫4. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ .PUK ‫ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺍ ً ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬PIN ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ...
  • Page 61 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ: ﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ◄ ‫ﺩﻭﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ: ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ◄ .‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‬ .‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء: ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ◄ .‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ: ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ◄...
  • Page 62 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 2-6-7 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺗﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ 3-6-7 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬...
  • Page 63 ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ 8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬WAP ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ, ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ً ‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ. ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ‬ .‫ﻭﺿﻊ...
  • Page 64 ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ 3-1-8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ 2-1-8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬URL ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ...
  • Page 65 ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﺆﻛﺪﺓ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺯﺩﺣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ: ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ (WAP ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ: ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ..‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ )ﺑﻼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻛﺪﺓ‬ .‫( ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻚ‬WAP ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ HTTP ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ: ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ HTTP .‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ...
  • Page 66 ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺣﺬﻑ: ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ◄ 6-1-8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ◄ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻃﻠﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ 4-1-8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ URL ‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ”‫“ﻣﺴﺢ...
  • Page 67 ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ SIM ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ 2-8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ SIM ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻛﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫...
  • Page 68 ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ 9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ً ﺎ‬ 1-9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ Sun ‫ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ Java ‫ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬Microsystems 1-1-9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ...
  • Page 69 ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ 3-9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ J2ME (Java 2 ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬Micro Edition (J2ME(Java 2 Micro Edition ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ...
  • Page 70 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ/ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ .‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺒﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ .‫ﺇﻋﻼﻥ...
  • Page 71 ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ F2400 :‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ GSM 900 / DCS 1800 : ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ C°55+ :‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ C°10- : ‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‬...
  • Page 72 ‫ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ - ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬F2400...
  • Page 73 35 ................‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ 8 ..................‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ 35 ................‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ 9 ........‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ 35 ................ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ‬ 13 ..............F2400 ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ‬ 36 ..................‫ﻧﺎﻡ‬ 13 ................‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ 16 ................ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ 37 ................‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬...
  • Page 74 ‫ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬F2400 46 ..............‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ 40 ................‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ 47 ................‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ 40 ................‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ 47 ................‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‬ 41 ................‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ 47 ................‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ 41 ................‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬ 41 ................‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ 48 ................. ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬...
  • Page 75 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ 60 ................‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ 55 ................. ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ 60 ..............‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ 56 ..............‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ 60 ............... ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 56 ..............‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ 60 ..............‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ 56 ..............‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ 60 ................‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ 60 .................
  • Page 76 ‫ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬F2400 72 ................‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ 65 ................... ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ 72 ................. ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ 65 ................‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ‬ 72 ................... ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ 65 ..............‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ 65 ................. GPRS ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ 73 ................‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ 74 ................‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ 66 ................ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬...
  • Page 77 ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻝ .ﺟﯽ‬ ‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬F2400 .‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی‬...
  • Page 78 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫( ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ICNIRP) ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺰﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ‬ .‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ٢ ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻩ )٠١( ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ...
  • Page 79 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ .‫• ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﻌﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻔﺎﻑ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ‬ .‫ﻭﻳﻨﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ، ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ‬ .‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ...
  • Page 80 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ .‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ...
  • Page 81 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ .‫• ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ .‫ﻫﺎﻳﯽ...
  • Page 82 F2400 ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ‬ ‫١. ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ .‫• ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫٢. ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺑﺎﻻ/ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ .‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﺪﻓﻰ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬...
  • Page 83 F2400 ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﭘﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ .‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ‬...
  • Page 84 F2400 ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ‬ ‫١. ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫٢, ٠١. ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ / ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ: ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫١. ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ .‫٣. ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ: ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬...
  • Page 85 F2400 ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫١١. ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ: ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻰ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫٢١. ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ/ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ: ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ .‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‬...
  • Page 86 F2400 ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ‬ .‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ .‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬...
  • Page 87 ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ .‫٢. ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‬ .‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‬ .‫١. ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ...
  • Page 88 ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ .‫۴. ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫٣. ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﻳﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ )ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ...
  • Page 89 ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻰ‬ .‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ/ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺩﺍﺑﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬ .‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬...
  • Page 90 ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫١. ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ”‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ “ﭘﺮ‬ ‫١. ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬ .‫ﺭﻭی...
  • Page 91 ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ...
  • Page 92 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‬ ‫١. ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﻋﻼﻣﺖ + ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‬ .‫١.
  • Page 93 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی٬ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻛﻨﺎﺭی ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬ ◄ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪی ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬ .‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬...
  • Page 94 ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫١. ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬ T٩ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ٬ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ...
  • Page 95 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ. ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ .‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫٣. ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی...
  • Page 96 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ١٢٣ (‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ◄ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻬﻬﺎی ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬ .‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ٣٢١ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ٣٢١ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬ .(‫ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ...
  • Page 97 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ٬ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻬﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ٬ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ.
  • Page 98 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ .‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ[ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ. ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ...
  • Page 99 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩی ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ، ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ...
  • Page 100 ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ٣ (‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 04 ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ (‫١ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 53 ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ Bluetooth ١ ‫١ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬ ‫٢ ﺳﺎﻛﺖ‬ ‫٢ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫٣ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫٣ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫۴ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫۴ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫۵ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫۵...

  • Page 101: ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ

    ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ٧ (‫۵ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 84 ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ (‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 06 ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫١ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫١ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫٢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫٢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫٣ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫٣ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫۴ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫۴...
  • Page 102 ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ (‫٩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 17 ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫١ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫٢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫٣ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬...
  • Page 103 ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ...
  • Page 104 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ١ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ: ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ◄ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﺎ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ، ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ. ﺷﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ‬ .‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ: ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ◄...
  • Page 105 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ‬ x-١-٢-‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ. ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ، ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫١. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ، ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ...
  • Page 106 ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ٢ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬CLI) ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ .‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ .
  • Page 107 ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ٢-۵-٢ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ۴-٢ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ، ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ، ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ٢‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ...
  • Page 108 ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ GPRS‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ۶-٢ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ )ﺟﯽ ﭘﯽ‬GPRS ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺁﺭ ﺁﺱ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ١-۶-٢ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ. ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ...
  • Page 109 ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ٣ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ Bluetooth ٢-٣ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ١-٣ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ،‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ۴ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ: ﺟﻤﻊ، ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ، ﺿﺮﺏ‬ ‫ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ‬Bluetooth .‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫...

  • Page 110: ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ

    ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ۵-٣ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ٣-٣ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ٠١ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ٠٢ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ١-۵-٣...

  • Page 111: ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ

    ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ۴ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫: ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬Bluetooth ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ◄ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ١-۴ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ،‫ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬Bluetooth ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫]ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ، ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩ‬...

  • Page 112: ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ

    ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ: ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ◄ ‫٢. ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ : ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻨﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ‬ .‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ...

  • Page 113: ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ

    ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ◄ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ۵-١-۴ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ، ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ .‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫١. ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ .‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫٢. ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫- ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ: ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ...

  • Page 114: ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ

    ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ .‫٣. ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫٢. ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ .‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ: ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬ .‫٣. ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ .‫•...

  • Page 115: ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ

    ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ١-٢-۴ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ٢-۴ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ .‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ٠٢ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ...
  • Page 116 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ۴-٢-۴ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‬ ۵-٢-۴ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ٣-۴ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫١. ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫٢. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ، ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ .‫]ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ[ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ...
  • Page 117 ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ۵ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫١. ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ) ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ، ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۵٢ ﺗﺎ ٨٢ )ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ( ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ...
  • Page 118 ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ: ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ◄ ‫: ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬T٩ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ‬ ◄ ‫ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺍﻣﻀﺎ: ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﻀﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ◄...
  • Page 119 ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ‬T٩ ‫: ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬T٩ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی‬ ◄ .‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ: ﭼﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ◄ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬T٩ ‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬T٩ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ: ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ‬ ◄...
  • Page 120 ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ “ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ”، ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ، ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ: ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ◄ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ: ﭘﻴﺎﻡ...
  • Page 121 ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ: ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ◄ .‫: ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ • ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ .‫ﺣﺬﻑ: ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ◄ .‫: ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ •...
  • Page 122 ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ‬ .‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ: ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ◄ ۶-۵ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ: ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ، ﺯﻣﺎﻥ، ﻧﻮﻉ، ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ‬ ◄ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻫﺎﻯ...
  • Page 123 ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫- ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی: ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬ ٧-۵ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬MMS ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ: ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ◄...
  • Page 124 ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫: ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ، ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬SMS ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬ ◄ .‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ: ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ◄ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬SMS ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻀﺎ‬ ٣-٧-۵ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ٢-٨-۵ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ،‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ. ﻧﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ: ﺷﻤﺎ...
  • Page 125 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺮ: ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻐﺎﺕ: ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺑﺎﺯﺭﮔﺎﻧﯽ‬ .‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺯﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ: ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬ ◄ ٣-٨-۵ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ...
  • Page 126 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ۶ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫[: ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ] ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﯽ‬ ◄ .‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬ :‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ۵ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ .+٢...
  • Page 127 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬ ٣-۶ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﺗﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ .١ ،‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‬ ‫٢. ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ .‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ٩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺁﻧﺮﺍ...
  • Page 128 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ: ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ◄ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ٣-۴-۶ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ: ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬ ◄ ‫•...
  • Page 129 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ٧ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ٢-٢-٧ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫] ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ .١ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ/ﻣﺎﻩ/ ﺳﺎﻝ، ﺳﺎﻝ/ﺭﻭﺯ/ ﻣﺎﻩ، ﺭﻭﺯ/ ﻣﺎﻩ/ ﺳﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ...
  • Page 130 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ۴-٧ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺡ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ: ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ۴ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ: ﺳﺒﻚ‬ ◄...
  • Page 131 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ٢-۴-٧ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ◄ .‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﺏ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ...
  • Page 132 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ۵-٧ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ۴-۴-٧ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ (‫) ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ PIN ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺪ‬ ١-۵-٧ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ◄ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎی‬ .‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ...
  • Page 133 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ٣-۵-٧ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ. ﺍﻳﻦ‬ .‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ...
  • Page 134 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ٧-٧ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ۶-٧ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ً ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ .‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬...
  • Page 135 ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ٨ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ )ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎی‬WAP ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﻬﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ( ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻧﮑﺪﺍﺭی، ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ، ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﺷﻨﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬...

  • Page 136: ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ

    ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ .‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ، ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ١-٨ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ: ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ◄ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ١-١-٨ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ .‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ...
  • Page 137 ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ .‫ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬IP) ‫: ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬IP ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ .‫- ﺣﺎﻣﻞ: ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ .‫( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬APN) : ‫١ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ: ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ GPRS ٢...
  • Page 138 ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ .‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ: ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ۵-١-٨ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ DNS ‫- ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬DNS ‫ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ‬IP ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ: ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ...
  • Page 139 ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭک ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ٢-٨ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ٧-١-٨ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻫﺎ ی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ، ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ، ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺳﻬﺎﻡ، ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ: ﺷﻤﺎ...
  • Page 140 ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ٩ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬ .‫ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‬ ١-٩ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ Sun Microsystems ‫ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻳﮏ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﭘﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬ ١-١-٩ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ MS Internet ‫...

  • Page 141: ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ

    ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ٢-٩ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ JAD ‫ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬JAR‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻔﯽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ...

  • Page 142: ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ

    .‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬LG ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ .‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‬ ‫• ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ، ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬...

  • Page 143: ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ

    ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ F2400 :‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ DCS 1800 / GSM 900 :‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ :‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬ +55°C : ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻗﻞ‬ -10°C...
  • Page 144 F2400 User Guide - ENGLISH...
  • Page 145 Introduction ………………………………………………… 8 Menu Tree ………………………………………………… 32 Guidelines for safe and efficient use ……………………… 9 Selecting functions and options ………………………… 35 F2400 features …………………………………………… 13 Profiles …………………………………………………… 36 Parts of the phone ………………………………………… 13 Activate …………………………………………………… 36 Display information ……………………………………… 16 Personalise ………………………………………………...
  • Page 146 F2400 User Guide Tools ……………………………………………………… 41 Copy all …………………………………………………… 45 Bluetooth ………………………………………………… 41 Delete all ………………………………………………… 46 My devices………………………………………………… 41 Information………………………………………………… 46 Handsfree devices ………………………………………… 41 Scheduler ………………………………………………… 47 Settings …………………………………………………… 41 Add new …………………………………………………… 47 Calculator ………………………………………………… 41 View ……………………………………………………… 47 Unit converter ……………………………………………...
  • Page 147 Table of Contents Info message ……………………………………………… 54 General pictures…………………………………………… 61 Read ……………………………………………………… 55 Mode pictures …………………………………………… 61 Topics ……………………………………………………… 55 Phonebook pictures ……………………………………… 61 Templates ………………………………………………… 55 Settings …………………………………………………… 62 Text templates …………………………………………… 55 Memory status …………………………………………… 62 Multimedia templates……………………………………… 56 Clear album …………………………………………………62 Signature …………………………………………………...
  • Page 148 F2400 User Guide Answer mode ……………………………………………… 65 Home ……………………………………………………… 70 Send my number ………………………………………… 65 Bookmarks ………………………………………………… 71 Call waiting………………………………………………… 66 Profiles …………………………………………………… 71 Minute minder …………………………………………… 66 Go to URL ………………………………………………… 73 Auto redial ………………………………………………… 66 Cache settings …………………………………………… 73 Security settings …………………………………………...

  • Page 149: Introduction

    Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact F2400 mobile phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone.

  • Page 150: Guidelines For Safe And Efficient Use

    DASY3 for use at the ear is 1.3 W/kg (10g). (SAR) information Product care and maintenance This mobile phone model F2400 has been designed to Warning: Use only batteries, charger and accessories comply with applicable safety requirement for approved for use with this particular phone model.
  • Page 151 Guidelines for safe and efficient use • The coating of the phone may be damaged if Electronics devices covered with wrap or vinyl wrapper. All mobile phones may get interference, which could • Use dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit. affect performance.
  • Page 152 Guidelines for safe and efficient use • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in In aircraft your motor vehicle such as car stereo, safety Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. equipment. • Turn off your mobile phone before boarding any •...
  • Page 153 Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery’s performance. • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life. • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack.

  • Page 154: F2400 Features

    F2400 features Parts of the phone 1. Headset jack • Connect a headset here. Front view 2. Up/down side keys • Press this key to display the current time on the front screen. • Controls the volume of keypad tone in standby 3.
  • Page 155 F2400 features Right side view Rear view Battery latch Press this button to remove the battery cover. Camera key Battery cover Holes for a Press and hold down this key to activate the carrying strap camera mode. Also use this key to take a shot.
  • Page 156 F2400 features 1. Earpiece Open view 2, 10. Left soft key/ Right soft key: Performs the function indicated by the text on the screen immediately above it. 1. Earpiece 3. Scheduler key: A shortcut key to the Scheduler menu. 4. Send key: Dials a phone number and answers 7.

  • Page 157: Display Information

    F2400 features 11. Downloads key: A shortcut key to the Downloads Display information menu. The table below describes various display indicators 12. End/Power key: Used to end a call or reject a call or icons that appear on the phone’s display screen.
  • Page 158 F2400 features Icon Description Indicates that the vibration ringer has been set. Indicates the receipt of an e-mail message. Indicates the Loud profile is activated. Indicates the Silent profile is activated. Indicates the Headset profile is activated. Indicates the General profile is activated.

  • Page 159: Getting Started

    Getting started Installing the SIM card and the handset 2. Remove the battery. battery Hold the top edge of the battery and lift the battery from the battery compartment. Make sure the power is off before you remove the battery. 1.
  • Page 160 Getting started 3. Install the SIM card 4. Install the battery. Insert the SIM card into the holder. Slide the SIM Insert the bottom of the battery first into the bottom card into the SIM card holder. Make sure that the edge of the battery compartment.

  • Page 161: Charging The Battery

    Getting started Charging the battery Caution • Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and/or the travel adapter. To connect the mains adapter to the phone, you must • Insert the battery pack charger vertically to have installed the battery.

  • Page 162: Disconnecting The Adapter

    Getting started Disconnecting the adapter Turning your phone on and off 1. When charging is finished, the moving bars of the Turning your phone ON battery icon stop and ‘Full’ is displayed on the 1. Install a battery to the handset and connect the screen.

  • Page 163: Access Codes

    Getting started Access codes PUK code (4 to 8 digits) You can use the access codes described in this The PUK (PIN Unblocking Key) code is required to section to avoid unauthorised use of your phone. The change a blocked PIN code. The PUK code may be access codes (except PUK and PUK2 codes) can be supplied with the SIM card.

  • Page 164: Barring Password

    Getting started Barring password The barring password is required when you use Call barring [Menu 7-5-3] function. You obtain the password from your network operator when you subscribe to this function. See page 67 for further details.

  • Page 165: General Functions

    General functions Making and answering calls Making an international call 1. Press and hold the key for the international Making a call prefix. The ‘+’ character automatically selects the 1. Make sure your phone is switched on. international access code. 2.
  • Page 166 General functions Adjusting the volume You can answer a call while using the address book or other menu features. If you want to adjust the earpiece volume during a 2. To end the call, close the phone or press the call, use the side keys ( ) .
  • Page 167 General functions Changing the text input mode T9 mode text input mode 1. When you are in a field that This mode lets you enter words with only one allows characters to be entered, keystroke per letter. Each key on the keypad has you will notice the text input more than one letter.
  • Page 168 General functions 1. When you are in the T9 predictive text input mode, Note You can't use this function in the Phonebook list start entering a word by pressing keys mode. . Press one key per letter. 2. Enter the whole word before editing or deleting any keystrokes.

  • Page 169: Contacts

    General functions Using the 123 (Number) mode Note Refer to the table below for more information on the characters available using the alphanumeric keys. The 123 mode enables you to enter numbers in a text message (a telephone number, for example). Characters in the order display Press the keys corresponding to the required digits Upper Case...

  • Page 170: In-Call Menu

    General functions In-call menu Answering an incoming call To answer an incoming call when the handset is Your phone provides a number of control functions ringing, simply press the key. The handset is that you can use during a call. To access these also able to warn you of an incoming call while you functions during a call, press the left soft key are already on a call.

  • Page 171: Multiparty Or Conference Calls

    General functions person who set up the multiparty call. These options Muting the microphone are all available from the In-Call menu. The maximum You can mute the microphone during a call by callers in a multiparty call are five. Once started, you pressing the [Options] key then selecting Mute on.
  • Page 172 General functions Activate the conference call on hold Ending a conference call Press the left soft key, then select the The currently displayed caller from a conference call Conference/Join All. can be disconnected by pressing the key. To end a conference call, press the left soft key, then select Adding calls to the conference call the Multiparty/End Multiparty.

  • Page 173: Menu Tree

    Menu Tree 1. Profiles (see page 36) 3. Tools (see page 41) 1 Vibrate only 1 Bluetooth 2 Silent 2 Calculator 3 General 3 Unit converter 4 Loud 4 World time 5 Headset 5 Voice recorder 6 Memory status 2. Call register (see page 38) 4.
  • Page 174 Menu Tree 5. Messages (see page 49) 7. Settings (see page 63) 1 Write message 1 Alarm clock 2 Inbox 2 Date & Time 3 Outbox 3 Phone settings 4 Drafts 4 Call settings 5 Listen to voice mail 5 Security settings 6 Info message 6 Network settings 7 Templates...
  • Page 175 Menu Tree 8. Service (see page 70) 9. Downloads (see page 75) 1 Internet 1 Games & more 2 SIM service 2 Pictures 3 Sounds...

  • Page 176: Selecting Functions And Options

    Selecting functions and options Your phone offers a set of functions that allow you to customise the phone. These functions are arranged in Menu Contacts menus and sub-menus, accessed via the two soft keys marked [ ] and [ ]. Each menu and sub-menu lets you view and alter the settings of a particular function.

  • Page 177: Profiles

    Profiles Menu 1 In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone Ring volume: Set the volume of the ringing tone. tones for different events, environments, or caller Message alert type: Set the alert type for groups. There are five preset profiles: Vibrate only, messages.

  • Page 178: Rename

    Profiles Rename Menu 1-x-3 You can rename a profile and give it any name you want. Note Vibrate only, Silent and Headset profiles cannot be renamed. 1. To change the name of a profile, scroll to the profile in the profile list and after pressing the left soft key or the OK key, select Rename.

  • Page 179: Call Register

    Call register Menu 2 You can check the record of missed, received, and Received calls Menu 2-2 dialled calls only if the network supports the Calling This option lets you view the last 10 incoming calls. Line Identification (CLI) within the service area. You can also: The number and name (if available) are displayed •...

  • Page 180: Delete Recent Calls

    Call register Delete recent calls Call costs Menu 2-5-2 Menu 2-4 Allows you to delete Missed calls and Received calls Allows you to check the cost of your last call, all calls, lists. You can delete Dialled calls and All calls lists at remaining and reset the cost.

  • Page 181: Gprs Information

    Call register GPRS information Menu 2-6 You can check the amount of data transferred over the network through the GPRS information option. In addition, you can also view how much time you are online. Call duration Menu 2-6-1 You can check the duration of Last call and All calls. You can also reset the call timers.

  • Page 182: Tools

    Tools Menu 3 Bluetooth Calculator Menu 3-1 Menu 3-2 Bluetooth enables compatible mobile devices, This contains the standard functions such as +, –, x, ÷ peripherals and computers that are in close proximity : Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division. to communicate directly with each other without 1.

  • Page 183: Unit Converter

    Tools Unit converter Voice recorder Menu 3-3 Menu 3-5 This converts any measurement into a unit you want. The voice memo feature you to record up to 10 voice There are 4 types that can be converted into units: messages and each memo is up to 20 Seconds. Length, Area, Weight, and Volume.

  • Page 184: Organiser

    Organiser Menu 4 Contacts Write text/multimedia message: After you have Menu 4-1 found the number you want, you can send a text/ Note In standby mode, press right soft key [Contacts] multimedia message to the selected number. to access directly. Send via Bluetooth: You can send the data of phone Search book to devices which is compatible with bluetooth...

  • Page 185: Caller Groups

    Organiser Group icon: Allows you to select the icon 1. Select Add new by press left soft key [Select] dependent on Group. or [OK]. Add member: You can add group members. Each 2. Select the memory you want to save: SIM or Phone. group member shouldn’t be exceeded 20.

  • Page 186: Settings

    Organiser Settings Menu 4-1-5 View options Scroll to highlight View options, and then press the 1. Press the right soft [Contacts] in standby left soft key [Select]. mode. - Name only: Set the phonebook list with displaying 2. Scroll to Settings, then press the left soft key only name.

  • Page 187: Delete All

    Organiser • Phone to SIM: You can copy the entry from Phone Information Menu 4-1-8 memory to SIM Card. Service dial number 3. You can see the following submenus. Use this function to access a particular list of • Keep original: When copying, Original Dial services provided by your network operator Number is kept.

  • Page 188: Scheduler

    Organiser 1. Open the phonebook first by pressing the right Description Description soft key [Contacts] in standby mode. Select Yearly Weekly Information by pressing the left soft key Monthly Daily [Select]. 2. Scroll to Memory status, then press the left soft In the scheduler mode, press left soft key [OK].

  • Page 189: View All

    Organiser Memo View all Menu 4-2-3 Menu 4-3 1. Select the Memo by pressing the left soft key Shows the notes that are set for all days. Use [Select]. to browse through the note lists. If you want to view the note in detail, press left soft key 2.

  • Page 190: Messages

    Messages Menu 5 2. After you complete the message, to select the Press the Menu key ( ) and select Messages required option, press the left soft key [Options]. using navigation keys. The following options are available. Write message Menu 5-1 Send: Enter the number or select the number from Menu 5-1-1 Write text message...

  • Page 191: Write Multimedia Message

    Messages Add T9 dictionary: You can add your own word. Sound: If available, you can attach a sound This menu can be shown only when the edit mode available for a short message. is Predictive. Text templates: You can use text templates already T9 languages: Select the language for T9 input set in the phone.
  • Page 192 Messages - Swap text and picture: You can switch the 3. You can add a slide by moving the cursor on position of picture and text of the message. then pressing the OK key or the left soft key [Select]. You can also add a slide using the right soft key Remove media: You can remove picture or sound in [Menu].

  • Page 193: Inbox

    Messages Inbox Each received message has the following options Menu 5-2 available. Press the left soft key [Options]. Received text messages and page messages can be Reply: Replies to the received message. searched and the contents can be viewed. Received messages are displayed in date order. You will be alerted when you have received messages.

  • Page 194: Outbox

    Messages Outbox Menu 5-3 Icon Icon directive You can view the list and contents of sent messages in Read multimedia messages this menu and can also verify if the transmission was Unread multimedia messages successful. The following options are available. Read notified multimedia messages Unread notified multimedia messages Icon...

  • Page 195: Drafts

    Messages • Delete: Deletes the current message. Listen to voice mail Menu 5-5 • Forward: Forwards the current message to other This menu provides you with a quick way of accessing recipients. your voice mailbox (if provided by your network). Before using this feature, you must enter the voice •...

  • Page 196: Read

    Messages • I’m on the way. Read Menu 5-6-1 • Top urgent. Please contact. When you have received broadcast messages and select Read to view the message, it will be displayed • I love you. on the screen. The following options are available. Topics Menu 5-6-2 View: Views the selected message.

  • Page 197: Multimedia Templates

    Messages Multimedia templates Menu 5-7-2 Signature Menu 5-7-3 Preview: Displays the draft multimedia message. This option helps you to make your own name card. Key in the name, mobile phone number, office number, Save: Saves multimedia messages in draft form or Fax number, and E-mail address.

  • Page 198: Multimedia Message

    Messages Reply via same service centre: When a message is Network settings: If you select multimedia message sent, it allows the recipients to reply and charge server, you can set URL for multimedia message the cost of the reply to your telephone bill. server.

  • Page 199: Info Message

    Messages Info message Menu 5-8-4 Receive Yes: If you select this menu, your phone will receive Info service messages. No: If you select this menu, your phone will not receive Info service messages any more. Alert Yes: Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers.

  • Page 200: Camera

    Camera Menu 6 With the camera you can take pictures of people and Brightness [ ]: Use the right/left navigation events while on the move. keys to adjust lighting. 5 lighting levels are available: -2, -1, 0, +1, +2. Take picture Menu 6-1 Autoshoot [ ]: Allows you to select the delay...

  • Page 201: Take In Modes

    Camera • To take a picture with Folder closed Take in modes Menu 6-2 You can see yourself by sub LCD, when you take your You can take a picture on the various of backgrounds. self-portrait. Furthermore, you can select a frame by pressing the navigation key ( 1.

  • Page 202: General Pictures

    Camera General pictures Menu 6-4-2 Protection: You can lock the picture for deleting in mistakes in this menu. You can view all pictures except of frame and phone book ones. Menu 6-4-4 Phonebook pictures Menu 6-4-3 You can view all phonebook pictures. Mode pictures Set as wallpaper: You can set a picture as a You can view all frame pictures.

  • Page 203: Settings

    Camera Settings Menu 6-5 Memory status Menu 6-5-1 You can check the capacity of photo and free memory. Menu 6-5-2 Clear album You can delete all pictures which saved in a memory. Menu 6-5-3 Auto save Automatically saves the pictures taken with the camera.

  • Page 204: Settings

    Settings Menu 7 You can set the following menus for your convenience Date format Menu 7-2-2 and preferences. You can set the Date format such as DD/MM/YYYY, 1. Press [Menu] in standby mode. MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD. (D: Day / M: Month / Y: Year) 2.

  • Page 205: Language

    Settings Default Language Menu 7-3-2 You can select a picture or an animation of You can change the language for the display texts in wallpaper by pressing your phone. This change will also affect the Language Input mode. My folder Call settings You can select a picture or an animation as Menu 7-4...

  • Page 206: Answer Mode

    Settings • View status All data calls: Diverts to a number with a PC connection unconditionally. View the status of the corresponding service. All fax calls: Diverts to a number with a fax Menu 7-4-2 Answer mode connection unconditionally. Flip open: If you select this menu, you can receive Cancel all: Cancels all call divert service.

  • Page 207: Call Waiting

    Settings Security settings Call waiting Menu 7-5 Menu 7-4-4 (network dependent) PIN code request Menu 7-5-1 Activate: If you select Activate, you can accept a In this menu, you can set the phone to ask for the PIN waiting (receiving) call. code of your SIM card when the phone is switched Cancel: If you select Cancel, you cannot recognize on.

  • Page 208: Phone Lock

    Settings Phone lock Menu 7-5-2 All incoming: The barring service for all incoming calls. You can use security code to avoid unauthorized use Incoming when roaming: The barring service for all of the phone. Whenever you switch on the phone, the incoming calls when roaming.

  • Page 209: Fixed Dial Number

    Settings 2. Input new Security code/PIN/PIN2 code and verify Fixed dial number them. Menu 7-5-4 (SIM dependent) Network settings You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone Menu 7-6 numbers. You can select a network which will be registered The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code.

  • Page 210: Preferred

    Settings Preferred Menu 7-6-3 You can set a list of preferred networks and the phone attempts to register with first, before attempting to register to any other networks. This list is set from the phone’s predefined list of known networks. Reset settings Menu 7-7 You can initialize all factory defaults.

  • Page 211: Service

    Service Menu 8 You can access various WAP (Wireless Application Description Protocol) services such as banking, news, weather Scrolls each line of the content area reports and flight information. These services are specially designed for mobile phones and they are Returns to the previous page maintained by WAP service providers.

  • Page 212: Bookmarks

    Service Delete all: Deletes all the bookmarks. Bookmarks Menu 8-1-2 This menu allows you to store the URL of favourite Menu 8-1-3 Profiles web pages for easy access at a later time. Your phone A profile is the network information used to connect to has several pre-installed bookmarks.
  • Page 213 Service IP address: Enter the IP address of the WAP IP address: Input the IP address of the WAP gateway you want. gateway you access. Dial number: Enter the telephone number to dial APN: Input the APN of the GPRS. to access your WAP gateway.

  • Page 214: Go To Url

    Service Port: Input the Proxy Port Cache settings Menu 8-1-5 - DNS settings The information or services you have accessed are saved in the cache memory of the phone. Primary server: Input the IP address of the primary DNS server you access Clear cache: Removes all context saved in cache.

  • Page 215: Security Certification

    Service SIM service Security certification Menu 8-1-7 Menu 8-2 Your service provider can offer special application A list of the available certification is shown. through SIM card, such as home banking, stock Authority: You can see the list of authority market, etc.

  • Page 216: Downloads

    Downloads Menu 9 Games & more - Prompt: You will be asked before the application Menu 9-1 makes the connection. My games & more Menu 9-1-1 - Never: No connection is allowed. In this menu, you can manage the Java applications Note You cannot remove or rename the preinstalled folder installed in your phone.

  • Page 217: Profiles

    Downloads Pictures Menu 9-2 Note • The JAR file is a compressed format of the Java program and the JAD file is a description file The left soft key [Options] will bring up the that includes all detailed information. From the following options.

  • Page 218: Accessories

    PC to exchange the data between them. Standard Battery Note • Always use genuine LG accessories. • Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty. • Accessories may be different in different regions; please check with our regional service company or Headset agent for further enquires.

  • Page 219: Technical Data

    Technical Data General Product name: F2400 System : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 Ambient Temperatures Max: +55°C Min: -10°C...

Table of Contents